Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (711.51 KB, 207 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
<b>WEEK 1: 07 – 11/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 1</b>
<b>UNIT 1: HELLO</b>
<b>Lesson 1 (1.2.3)</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, students will be able to greet and self-introduce.
<b>-</b> Educate Ss to say hello when they meet
<b>- Languages focus</b>
<i>+ Hello. I’m Mai</i>
<b>II. Resources: handmade puppets, photographs of students.</b>
<b>III. Procedures : </b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Class organization</b>
<b>2. Old lesson</b>
<b>3. New lesson</b>
* Warm up:
<b>-</b> Say hello to the class and introduce
yourself, using Hello, I’m Trang.
Lead in the new lesson: Unit 1
-Lesson1(1.2.3)
<b> * Look, listen and repeat</b>
- Ask Ss to open their book on page 6.
- Ask Sts the name of the characters
- Use a poster to present the context
- Play the recording twice
- Ask Ss to repeat a few times
- Call on two pairs to play roles
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs
- Call some pair to perform
- Have the whole class repeat all the
phrases a few times to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach the new words:
<i><b>+ hello / hi</b></i>
<i><b>+ I’m = I am</b></i>
<i><b>+ nice to meet you</b></i>
* Note:
<i><b>+ Hi is very informal. Sts can use with</b></i>
<i>friends but not with an adult</i>
<i><b>+ Hello is also informal and friendly but</b></i>
<i>more formal than Hi. It can be used with</i>
<i>teachers and other adults.</i>
<b> * Point and say </b>
- Ask Sts to look at the pictures on
page 6 and identify the characters
- Greet and self-introduce
- Listen and write the title
- Identify characters
- Listen
- Repeat
- Play role
a, Mai – Nam
b. Miss Hien – class
- Practice in pairs
- Perform
- Repeat
- Listen and repeat
- Look and identify:
- Explain the pattern
<i><b>+ Hello. I’m _______ .</b></i>
<i><b> + Hello, _________. I’m _________ .</b></i>
- Ask Ss about what they fill in the
blanks
- Ask Sts to work in pair.
- Call on some pair s to perform the
task.
- Comment and correct the mistake
<b> * Let’s talk</b>
- Asks Ss to look at the pictures on
page 6 and indentify the characters.
- Guide Ss to practice greeting and
self-introducing.
- Asks Ss to use the names in their
books or their real names to practice.
- Ask Ss to practice in small groups.
- Call someone to perform at the front
of the class
- Comment
<b>4. Reinforcement</b>
- Review the lesson
- Call Ss to greet each other, and self
introduce.
- Educate Ss to say hello when they
meet
<b>5. Home link</b>
- Ask Ss to practice greeting self
introducing at home.
- Be ready Unit 1 – Lesson 1(4.5.6)
- Comment the lesson
- Answer
- Work in pairs
- Practice
- Listen
- Look and identify
- Practice
- Work in group
- Perform
- Listen
- Listen
- Practice
Listen
<b>WEEK 1: 07 – 11/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 2</b>
<b>UNIT 1: HELLO</b>
<b>Lesson 1 (4.5.6)</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, students will be able to greet and self-introduce.
<b>-</b> Educate Ss to say hello when they meet
<b>- Languages focus</b>
<i>+ Hello. I’m Mai</i>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
1. <b>Class organization</b>
2. <b>Old lesson</b>
- Ask Ss to greet and self-introduce
- Comment
3. <b>New lesson</b>
<b>-</b> Lead in the new lesson: Unit 1 - Lesson1(4.5.6)
<b>* Listen and tick</b>
- Have Ss open the book page 7, and describe
the pictures.
- Set the scene: “you are going to listen to the
<i>recording, match the information and tick the </i>
<i>correct picture.”</i>
- 1st<sub>:Play the recording all the way through for </sub>
Ss to listen while they are looking the pictures
in their books
- 2nd<sub>: play the recording for Ss to listen and tick </sub>
the correct pictures.
- Have Ss trade their answers in pairs for
correction
- 3rd<sub>: play the recording for Ss to check their </sub>
answers.
- Give feedback 1a, 2b
<b>-</b> Ask some questions to ensure Ss’
comprehension of the listening text.
<b>* Let’s write</b>
- Have Ss look at the table on page 7
- Ask Ss what they have to do in this task
- Ask them to discuss and complete the blanks
with given words.
I’m
Hello
<b>1.</b> Mai: ______. I’m Mai
Nam: Hi, Mai. ____ Nam.
<b>2.</b> Miss Hien: Hello. _____ Miss Hien
Class : __ Miss Hien. Nice to meet you.
- Call someone to write on the board
- Check and correct mistakes.
<b>* Let’s sing.</b>
- Show the chart of the song “ Hello”
<i><b>(Hello. I’m Mai) 2</b></i>
<i><b>(Hello. I’m Nam) 2</b></i>
<i><b>(Hello. I’m Miss Hien) 2</b></i>
<i><b>(Nice to meet you) 2</b></i>
- Play the tape a few times
- Ask Ss to read aloud each line in the song
- Ask them to listen again and repeat
- Have Ss practice the song in pairs
- Call each group, then pairs to perform
- Correct and comment
- Play the tape once to reinforce their
- Talk
- Listen
- Listen and write the title
- Look and describe
- Listen the scene
- Listen carefully
- Tick
- Discuss
- Check the answers
- Take note
- Answer some question
- Look
- Answer
- Discuss and complete
- Write
<i>1. Hello / I’m</i>
<i>2 .I’m / Hello</i>
- Correct
- Look at the chart
Listen
- Read the lines
- Listen and repeat
- Practice
- Perform
<b>WEEK 1: 07 – 11/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 3</b>
<b>UNIT 1: HELLO</b>
<b>Lesson 2 (1.2.3)</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, students will be able to greet and respond to greeting.
<b>-</b> Educate Ss about greetings.
<b>- Languages focus</b>
+ Bye / goodbye.
<i>+ How are you?</i>
<i>+ I’m fine. Thanks / thank you.</i>
<b>II. Resources: textbook, pictures.</b>
<b>III. Procedures : </b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Class organization</b>
<b>2. Old lesson</b>
- Ask Ss to greet and self-introduce
- Comment
<b>3. New lesson</b>
<b>-</b> Lead in the new lesson: Unit 1-
Lesson 2(1.2.3)
<b>* Look , listen and repeat</b>
<b>-</b> Have Ss open the book page 8 and
identify the characters in the
pictures.
<b>-</b> Set the scene: “you are going to
<i>hear 2 conversations between Nam </i>
<i>and Mai”</i>
<i><b>a. - Hi, Nam. How are you?</b></i>
<i><b>- I’m fine, thanks. And you?</b></i>
<i><b>- Fine, thanks</b></i>
<i><b>b. - Bye, Nam</b></i>
<i><b>- Bye, Mai</b></i>
<b>-</b> Play the recording all the way
through for Ss to listen while they
are reading the dialogue.
<b>-</b> Play the recording again for Ss to
repeat each line of the dialogue a few
times.
<b>-</b> Ask the groups to repeat the dialogue
and swap
<b>-</b> Have Ss practice the dialogue in
pairs.
<b>-</b> Call on some pairs to perform, others
comment.
- Talk
- Listen
- Listen and write the title
- Identify : Nam and Mai
- Listen the scene
- Listen the tape
- Read each line
- Play role
- Practice in pairs
- Perform
- Comment
<b>-</b> Correct the mistakes.
<b>* Point and say.</b>
- Have Ss look at the speech bubbles
on page 8
- Ask them to identify the characters
in pictures
- Ask Ss to guess and say the lines in
the bubbles
<i><b> How are you, _____?</b></i>
<i><b>Fine, thanks. And you? </b></i>
<i><b>Fine, thank you.</b></i>
- Have Ss repeat each line in the
bubbles some times
- Explain the situation
- Ask Ss to fill the bubbles and repeat
the step with other pictures.
- Have Ss practice in pairs 4
situations.
- Go around and correct the mistakes.
- Call on some pairs to ask and
answer.
- Ask someone to comment.
- Ask the whole class to repeat the
phrase practiced in chorus to
reinforce the pronunciation.
<b>* Let’s talk</b>
- Asks Ss to look at the pictures on
page 8 describe the situation.
- Guide Ss to practice greeting and
responding
- Ask Ss to practice in small groups.
- Call someone to perform at the front
of the class
- Comment
<b>4. Reinforcement</b>
- In this lesson, Ss have learned how
to greet and respond greeting.
- Educate Ss to greet and respond
<b>5. Home link</b>
- Have Ss to further practice at home.
- Be ready Unit 1 – Lesson 2(4.5.6)
Comment the lesson
- Repeat in few times
- Listen carefully
- Fill the bubbles
- Work in pairs
- Correct
- Practice : ask and answer
- Comment
- Repeat in chorus
- Look and describe
- Listen
- Work in group
- Perform
- Listen
- Listen the summary
- Practice
- Listen
<b>WEEK 1: 07 – 11/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 4</b>
<b>UNIT 1: HELLO</b>
<b>Lesson 2 (4.5.6)</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, students will be able to greet and respond to listen, read and
write about greeting.
<b>-</b> Educate Ss about greetings.
<b>- Languages focus</b>
+ Bye / goodbye.
<i>+ How are you?</i>
<i>+ I’m fine. Thanks / thank you.</i>
<b>II. Resources: textbook, pictures.</b>
<b>III. Procedures : </b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Class organization</b>
<b>2. Old lesson</b>
- Ask Ss to greet and respond
- Comment
<b>3. New lesson</b>
<b>-</b> Lead in the new lesson: Unit 1-
Lesson 2(4.5.6)
<b>* Listen and number</b>
- Have Ss look at pictures a, b, c and d
and describe the situations in these
pictures
- Set the scene: “you are going to
<i>listen to the recording about 4 </i>
<i>situations and number the correct </i>
<i>pictures.</i>
- 1st<sub>:Play the recording all the way </sub>
through for Ss to listen while they
are looking the pictures in their
books
- 2nd<sub>: play the recording for Ss to listen</sub>
and number the correct pictures.
- Choose one or two Ss to share their
answers with their classmates.
- 3rd<sub>: play the recording for Ss to </sub>
check their answers.
- Have Ss trade their answers in pairs
for correction
- Comment and give feedback
<b>* Read and complete.</b>
- Have Ss look at the table on page 9
- Talk
+ Hello,___. How are you?
Hi, ____. I’m fine. thanks
- Listen
- Listen and write the title
- Look at the pictures
- Describe
- Listen the scene
- Listen carefully
- Number
- Share the answers
- Check the answers
- Correct
- Take note
- Ask Ss what they have to do in this
task
- Ask them to discuss and complete
the blanks with given words.
- Call someone to write on the board,
check Ss’ notebook
- Check and correct mistakes
- Ask Ss to practice 3 conversations
<b>* Let’s write</b>
- Asks Ss to look at the pictures on
page 9 and identify characters.
- Ask Ss to write the missing words to
complete the conversations.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs
- Call someone to write their answer on
the board
- Comment , correct
<b>4. Reinforcement</b>
- In this lesson, Ss have learned how
to listen, read and write about
greeting
- Educate Ss about greetings
<b>5. Home link</b>
- Have Ss to further practice at home.
- Be ready Unit 1 – Lesson 3(1.2.3)
- Comment the lesson
- Answer
- Read and discuss
- Complete
<i><b>1.Goodbye</b></i>
<i><b>2.Bye</b></i>
<i><b>3.Fine</b></i>
<i><b>4.thank you</b></i>
- Correct
- Read aloud
- Look and answer: Mai and Nam
- Listen the task
- Work in pair
- Write
- Correct
- Listen the summary
- Practice
<b>Bye thank you fine</b>
<b>goodbye</b>
<b>1.</b> Miss Hien: Goodbye, class.
Class : (1)_____, Miss Hien.
<b>2.</b> Mai: Bye, Nam
Nam: (2) _____ , Mai.
<b>3.</b> Nam: How are you, Quan?
Quan: (3) ______, thanks. And
you?
<b>Week 2: 14 – 18/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 5</b>
<b>UNIT 1: HELLO</b>
<b>Lesson 3 (1.2.3)</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, students will be able to practice 2 sounds / b/ and /h/ .
<b>-</b> Educate Ss about greetings.
<b>- Languages focus</b>
+ Bye / Hello
<b>II. Resources: textbook, pictures, cassette player, chart</b>
<b>III. Procedures : </b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Class organization</b>
<b>2. Old lesson</b>
- Ask Ss to greet and respond
- Comment
<b>3. New lesson</b>
<b>-</b> Lead in the new lesson: Unit 1- Lesson 3(1.2.3)
<b>* Listen and repeat</b>
<b>-</b> Have Ss open the book page 10, draw their
attention to the letters colored differently in the
words Bye and Hello
<b>-</b> Produce the sound of the letter b and h
<b>-</b> Have Ss repeat the focused sounds a few times.
<b>-</b> Play the recording twice and ask Ss to repeat
<b>-</b> Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary/ correct typical pronunciation errors.
<b>-</b> Call on someone to pronounce
<b>-</b> Have the whole class recite the chant to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>* Listen and write.</b>
- Have Ss look at the table on page 10
-Ask Ss what they have to do in this task
- Play the tape twice
- Ask them to listen and write the answers
- Call someone to write on the board, check Ss’
notebook
- Check and correct mistakes
- Ask Ss to read aloud 2 sentences
<b>* Let’s chant</b>
- Show the chart of the chant “ Hello”
Talk
+ Hello,___. How are you?
<i>Hi, ____. I’m fine. </i>
<i>Thanks.</i>
- Listen
- Listen and write the title
- Look at the words.
- Notice the letter b and h
- Listen carefully
- Repeat in chorus
- Listen and repeat
- Help, correct the mistakes
- Perform
- Recite in chorus
- Look
- Answer : listen and write
- Listen
- Write
<i><b>1………..</b></i>
<i><b>2………..</b></i>
- Correct
- Read aloud
<b>4.</b> _____________, Nam.
<i><b>(Hello. I’m Mai ) 2 (Hello. How are you?) 2</b></i>
<i><b>( Hi, Mai) 2</b></i> <i><b>( Fine, thank you.) 2</b></i>
<i><b>(I’m Nam) 2</b></i> <i><b>( And you?) 2</b></i>
<i><b> (Nice to meet you) 2 ( Fine, thank you.) 2</b></i>
- Ask Ss to read aloud each line in the song and
clap their hands
- Ask them to listen again and repeat
- Have Ss practice the chant in pairs
- Call each group, then pairs to perform
- Correct and comment
- Play the tape once to reinforce their
pronunciation
<b>4. Reinforcement</b>
- In this lesson, Ss have learned how to
pronounce 2 sounds / b/ , /h/.
- Educate Ss about greetings
<b>5. Home link</b>
- Have Ss to further practice at home.
- Be ready Unit 1 – Lesson 3(4.5.6)
- Comment the lesson
- Look at the chart
- Listen
- Read and clap
- Perform
- Listen and correct
- Listen
- Practice
Listen
<b>Week 2: 14 – 18/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 6</b>
<b>UNIT 1: HELLO</b>
<b>Lesson 3 (4.5.6)</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, students will be able to review the greetings they’ve learnt
<b>-</b> Educate Ss about greetings.
<b>- Languages focus</b>
<i>+ Hello, I’m ___</i>
<i><b>+ How are you? I’m fine, thank you.</b></i>
<i><b>+ Nice to meet you.</b></i>
<b>II. Resources: textbook, pictures, cassette player, chart</b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Class organization</b>
<b>2. Old lesson</b>
- Ask Ss to greet and respond
- Comment
<b>3. New lesson</b>
<b>-</b> Lead in the new lesson: Unit 1- Lesson 3(4.5.6)
<b>* Read and match</b>
<b>-</b> Show the chart and ask Ss to look
- Talk
- Listen
<b>1.</b>Hello. I’m Miss
Hien.
<b>2.</b>Hi. I’m Nam.
<b>3.</b>Bye, Mai.
<b>4.</b>How are you?
a. Hello, Nam. I’m
Mai.
b. Bye, Nam.
c. I’m fine, thanks.
d. Hello, Miss Hien.
Nice to meet you
<b>-</b> Ask Ss to discuss how to do this task
<b>-</b> Ask them to work in group of 4
<b>-</b> Call on some group to give their answers.
<b>-</b> Comment and correct the mistakes
<b>-</b> Give feedback
<b>* Read and write.</b>
- Show the chart and have Ss look
-Ask Ss about the task
- Ask them to complete the sentences
- Get Ss to write their answer on the chart
- Check and correct mistakes
- Ask Ss to read aloud all sentences
<b>* Project</b>
- Instruct Ss how to make a name card by
themselves.
<i><b>School:</b></i>
<i><b>Class:</b></i>
<i><b>Name: </b></i>
- Ask Ss to prepare some school things
- Ask Ss to finish at home and show them on
front of the class next lesson
<b>4. Reinforcement</b>
- In this lesson, Ss have reviewed about
greetings
- Educate Ss about greetings
- Discuss
- Match
- Answer : listen and write
<i><b>1_; 2 _; 3_; 4_</b></i>
- Correct
- Listen
- Look at the chart
- Answer
- Read and write
- Go to the board
<b>1.</b> Hello
<b>2.</b> I’m
<b>3.</b> Nice
<b>4.</b> How
<b>5.</b> Fine
- Listen and correct
- Read aloud
- Listen
- Practice
- Finish
- Listen
Listen
<b>1.</b>_____________. I’m Mai.
<b>2.</b>Hi, Mai._____________ Nam.
<b>3.</b>______ to meet you, Miss Hien.
<b>4.</b>______ are you?
<b>5. Home link</b>
- Have Ss to further practice at home and be
ready next lesson: Unit 2 – lesson 1(1.2.3)
Comment the lesson
<b>Week 2: 14 – 18/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 7</b>
<b>UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
one’s name.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What’s your name? - My name’s Mai
- Vocabulary: what, your, name, my, is=’s, are=’re
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Sing hello song
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 12 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and
Nam, Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Teach vocabulary:
What are=’re
Your Name
My is=’s
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: What’s your name?-My name’s Mai.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about one’s name. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 2: 14 – 18/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 8</b>
<b>UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
one’s name.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
<b>Warm up</b>
Ask and answer questions about one’s name
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.a 2. b</i>
<b>5. Look and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. My name is / I’m</i>
<i> 2. Mai/ my name is/ I’m</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The alphabet song, Page 13.
- Play the recording and listen to The alphabet song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
Practise in pairs
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 3: 21 – 25/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 9</b>
<b> UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to</b>
spell one’s name.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: How do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A
- Vocabulary: How, spell
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 14.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
Sing the song
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to review phrases
What’s your name? My name’s Mai
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
How spell
- Elicits the structures
How are do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about how to spell one’s name.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words and structure
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 3: 21 – 25/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 10</b>
<b>UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to</b>
spell one’s name.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a</i>
<b>1. Read and match</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 15.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
Listen and number
Ps answer
<i>to get the information in order to match the pictures</i>
<i>to the appropriate dialogues.”</i>
Have a revision of the language: “How do you spell
<i>your name?” – “L – I – N – D – A.”</i>
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – b; 3-a</i>
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practice the dialogues in
pairs
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
<b>Week 3: 21 – 25/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 11</b>
<b>UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
one’s name, how to spell one’s name, make and respond to instructions. Pronounce the sounds
in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words Mai and Peter
-Introduce the sounds /m/ and <b>/p/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i><b>Answer: 1. Peter 2. Mai</b></i>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant What’s your name?
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 3: 21 – 25/9/2015</b>
<b>Period 12</b>
<b>UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
one’s name, how to spell one’s name.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Read the chant: What’s your name?
- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to
greeting.
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the sentences in
the book
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c.</i>
<b>5.</b> <b>Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. my 2. Hi 3. How 4. What’s 5. name’s
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Work in groups.
Interview their classmates.
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work in groups
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 4: 28/9 – 02/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 13</b>
<b> UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills:</b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: This is Tony
- Vocabulary: This
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 13 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to T introduce
someone to class, The class greet the newcomer.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats teacher’s part, the other
repeats Ss’ part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Model sentence: This is Tony.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call someone to practice in front of the
whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of
the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in groups to introduce someone. Call
some groups to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Sing the alphabet song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in groups
Do exercises in the
<b>Week 4: 28/9 – 02/10/2015</b>
<b>UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils to ask and answer about the specific information.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
<b>Warm up</b>
Ask Ps to introduce someone
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 19 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.a 2.b</i>
<b>5. Look and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
S introduce someone
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
<i>Answers: 1. This is / hello, Nam</i>
<i> 2.This is/ hello, Phong</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce the How are you? song, Page 19.
- Play the recording and listen the How are you? song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
Workbook
<b>Week 4: 28/9 – 02/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 15</b>
<b>UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Is that Tony?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t
- Vocabulary: that, yes, no, is not = isn’t, it
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to make and respond to instruction
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>2. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 20.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Is that Tony? Yes, it is.
Is that Quan? No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
Do the same with the dialogue between Tom and
Linda
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Teach vocabulary:
That yes
No is not = isn’t
It
Check vocab: what and where
- Elicits the structures
Is that Tony? - Yes, it is.
Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 21
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
Is that Tony? - Yes, it is.
Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong
Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the
step with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and
use the information in picture a, b, c and d to practice
in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Observe 4 pictures
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about someone.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practice in pairs
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 4: 28/9 – 02/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 16</b>
<b> UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss do after T.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d</i>
<b>5. Look, read and answer</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures a, b,
c, d on page 21.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the questions
<i>and find out the answer.”</i>
Have a revision of the language:
“Is that Linda?”– “Yes, it is.”
Ask Ss to read the questions and answer (match the
sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: a. Is that Linda? – Yes, it is.</i>
<i> b, Is that Peter? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom</i>
<i> c, Is that Phong? – Yes, it is. </i>
<i> d, Is that Linda? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom.</i>
<b>6. Let’s play</b>
- Explain how the game is played: pupils play in
groups of six. Each group has one set of four pieces of
paper. On each of which one of the four words is
written, e.g. this, is, and one of the character’s names
that they have learnt (Linda or Tony or Tom or Mary).
Each group member pick up one piece of paper. Then
the pupils in each group put their pieces of paper
together in order to make a sentence, e.g. This is my
friend Linda.
- Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Move
around to help with the activity.
- When the time is up, call on two groups to
demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look 4 pictures
Work in pairs
Read the questions and
answers in pairs
of the class observe and give comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Follow up:
- Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their
classmates / friends.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 5: 05 - 9/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 17</b>
<b> UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
someone, introduce someone. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /t/, /j/ correctly .
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to introduce someone
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words Tony and yes
-Introduce the sounds /t/ and <b>/j/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. Tony 2. Yes
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant Is that Nam?
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in groups and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the
blanks
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 5: 05 - 9/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 18</b>
<b> UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
someone, introduce someone.
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone: </b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Read the chant Is that Nam?
<b>4. Read and complete.</b>
-Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people in
pictures in book on page 23
T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
Correct the pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – this; 2 – hello; 3 – that; 4 – isn’t.</i>
<b>5. Look, read and write</b>
Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people
in pictures in book on page 23
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the
blanks”.
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answer: 1. Mai 2. Nam 3. Phong 4. Linda 5.Peter
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw their best
friend. Then introduce them to class
-Ss draw the picture on the board.
- Ps listen and give the comment and correct Ps’ errors
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read chant
Observe the pictures.
Read the sentences in the
book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work individually
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 5: 05 - 9/10/2015</b>
<b> UNIT 4: HOW ARE YOU?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
someone.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- It’s Tony
- Vocabulary: who, Mr, Miss, Mrs
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Sing how are you song
<b>1. Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 24 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to hear Mai and
Nam, Linda and Nam ask and answer questions
introduce someone.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on four Ps. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Nam
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Who Mr
Miss Mrs
Check vocab: rub out and remember
Model sentence: Who’s that?-It’s Tony.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Quan and Peter to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about someone. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
practise
Pair work
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 5: 05 - 9/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 20</b>
<b> UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
someone.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
<b>Warm up: Jumped words </b>
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 25 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
Work in pairs
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.b 2.a</i>
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Who 2.Who’s that?</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures. Tell pupils that they
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the answer.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of
the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>Answer: 1. It’s Tony 2. It’s Mary</b></i>
<i> 3. It’s Peter 4. It’s Linda</i>
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Work individually
Pair work
<b>Week 6: 12 - 16/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 21</b>
<b> UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s</b>
age.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: How old are you?- I’m eight years old.
- Vocabulary: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, How old, years old
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about someone.
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 26.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into three groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the others repeat Nam’s part and teacher’s
part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26
- Teach vocabulary:
How old five
Year(s) old six
One seven
Two eight
Three nine
How old are you? - I’m eight years old.
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Miss Hien
and Tom to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about someone’s age.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 6: 12 - 16/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 22</b>
<b>UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s</b>
age.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils count from 1 to 10.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about
someone
<b>4. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and fill the missing information they hear in
the blanks. Before listening Ps can guess the answer.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
missing words. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.six 2.seven 3.eight 4.ten</i>
<b>5. Read and tick</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 27.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues
<i>to get the information in order to tick the right</i>
<i>picture”</i>
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and fill the missing
words
Ps answer
Look at 4 pictures
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
<i>Answers: 1 – 6; 2 – 8; 3-10; 4-10</i>
<b> 6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The Let’s count from one to ten song, Page
27.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Practise in pairs
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 6: 12 - 16/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 23</b>
<b>UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer question about
someone and someone’s age. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /f/, /s/ correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils count from one to ten.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer question about someone
and someone’s age.
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words five and six
-Introduce the sounds /f/ and <b>/s/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i><b>Answer: 1. five 2. Six </b></i>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant How are you?.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
<b>Week 6: 12 - 16/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 24</b>
<b>UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer question about
someone and someone’s age.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s actions</b> <b>Students’ actions</b>
<i><b>Warm up: </b></i>
- T asks Ss to read chant How are you?
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Teach vocabulary: Friend
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – a; 3 – b.</i>
<b>5.Read and write</b>
- Ask Ps to observe and identify the characters in
pictures.
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise.
-Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. How old/I’m 3. How old/I’m/years old
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Talk to your friends.
Write their names and ages
-Ss act out in front of the class. The others listen to
and give the comment, correct the mistakes
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read then Fill the suitable
words in the blanks
Work in group
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 7: 19 - 23/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 25</b>
<b>UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i><b> introduce one’s friend and respond</b>
to the introduction.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: this is my friend Mary.
- Vocabulary: friend
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Warm up: Sing Let’s count from one to ten song
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 30 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai, Linda
and Mary greet and introduce one’s friend and
respond to the introduction.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Friend
Model sentence: Mai, this is my friend, Mary.
– Hello, Mary. Nice to meet you.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to introduce one’s friend and
respond to the introduction. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 7: 19 - 23/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 26</b>
<b>UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to introduce one’s friend and respond</b></i>
to introduction.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils introduce one’s friend and respond to instructions</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up : play game bingo</b>
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of
the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters
in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.b 2.a</i>
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
Play game
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. This is / Hello</i>
<i> 2. my friend/ Hello</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The more we are together, Page 31.
- Play the recording and listen The more we are together
<i>song</i>
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 7: 19 - 23/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 27</b>
<b>UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: they, they are=they’re, are not=aren’t
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction.
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 32.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases
Are they your friends?
–Yes, they are/No, they aren’t
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Quan’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation. Do the same with the dialogue in
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32
- Teach vocabulary:
They they are=they’re
are not=aren’t
- Elicits the structures
Are they your friends? –Yes, they are
- No, they aren’t Elicit
the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss
to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about friends.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 7: 19 - 23/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 28</b>
<b>UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about friends.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped words
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
Practise in pairs
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answer: 1.d 2.a 3.b 4.c</i>
<b>5. Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 15.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>and use the suitable words given to fill in the</i>
<i>blanks.”</i>
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – name; 2 – nine; 3 - and; 4 - friends</i>
<b>6. Write about your friends</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 33. Ask them
to read the text. T explains how to do the exercise.
- Ss do the exercise. Call on some Ss to report their
answers. Others listen and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 8: 26 - 30/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 29</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond</b></i>
to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. Pronounce the sounds in the
letters a / /, e/ / correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words that and yes
-Introduce the sounds / / and <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i><b>Answer: 1. that 2. yes</b></i>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant Who’s that?
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 8: 26 - 30/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 30</b>
<b>UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to will be able to: </b></i>introduce one’s
friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and</b>
answer questions about friends.
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant Who’s that?
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
pictures to the text”.
- Teach vocab:
- Who?
Read the chant
- Model sentence: Who is that? – It’s Tony.
Who are they? – They’re Peter and Linda.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.</i>
5. Circle the correct words
-T explains how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the sentences in the book and
choose the best words given to complete the sentences
- do the exercise then report in front of the whole
class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
<i>Answer: 1. friend 2. they 3. Peter and Mary </i>
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: present some friends
to class
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
sentence.
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Choose the best answer to
fill in the blanks
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 8: 26/10 – 30/10/2015</b>
<b>Period 31,32</b>
<b>REVIEW 1</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i>
- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 1-5,
using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<i><b>-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook</b></i>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1
to unit 5
<b>1. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page
36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick
the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer
with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answers: 1 – b; 2 – a; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5- b</i>
2. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d</b> <i> 4.a</i>
<b>3. Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and tick
Work individually
Listen and tick
-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill
the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in
pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front
of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
<i>Answer: 1. Hello 2. name 3. friends 4. nine</i>
4. Read and match
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to
get the information in order to match the sentences to
the sentences.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<i>Answer: 1.e 2. d 3. b</i> <i>4.a 5. c</i>
<b>5. Look and say</b>
Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 37.
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act
out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books.
Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Pair works
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 9: 02 – 06/11/2015</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i>
- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
- Phonic: Revisions
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
-Ps ask Ps some questions
<i><b>3. New lesson: </b></i>
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1
to unit 5
<b>1. Read and Listen to the story</b>
This is the first of the four cartoons about Miu and Cat
and Chit and Mouse. To help Ps get the idea of the
story, simply let them read and listen to this episodes,
the initial task will be more challenging.
<b>2. Complete the conversation</b>
-Ask students to read the story in the book and fill the
suitable words to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs
to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the
whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the story
<i>Answer: 1. I’m 2. Are you 3. fine 4. Your</i>
<i> 5. I’m 6. Meet 7. Do you spell</i>
3. Work in pairs. Have a similar conversation with
<b>a partner. Use the names.</b>
Have Ps work in pair. Use the guide in part2 but use
the real information about themselves
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
<b>4. Match the questions with the answers</b>
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 38.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the story to get
the information in order to match the questions to the
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and answer T’s
questions
Work in pairs
answers.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<i>Answer: 1. c 2. a 3. d</i> <i>4. b </i>
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics,
vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5.
Work individually
Work in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 9: 02 – 06/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 34,35 </b>
<b>Test 1 and correct test 1</b>
<b>Week 9: 02 – 06/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 36</b>
<b>UNIT 6: STAND UP!</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: be quiet, don’t talk, come here, open your book, close your book, sit
down, stand up
- Vocabulary: be quiet, boy, sir, sorry, please, class
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
<b> - Have pupils do the exercises.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing hello song
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 40 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mr loc and Ss
give and respond to instructions.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mr Loc’s part, the other
repeats Ss’ part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
<b>2. Point, say and do actions</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Boy
Sir
Sorry
Please
class
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: be quiet = don’t talk
come here
open your book
close your book
sit down
stand up
Ask T requests and Ss do.
- Model: Call some Ss request and the others do.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 10: 09 – 13/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 37</b>
<b>UNIT 6: STAND UP!</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to make and respond to instructions.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up Play game: Simon says</b>
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Look and write</b>
Play game
Indentify the characters
in each picture
- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Open 2. Quiet 3. Close 4. Sit 5. Come </i>
<i>5. Stand </i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
Workbook
<b>Week 10: 09 – 13/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 38</b>
<b>UNIT 6: STAND UP!</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can
May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t
- Vocabulary: speak, write, May I…, can, can’t
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Play game: Simon says
<b>1. Look, listen and repeat</b>
- Whole class. Have pupils look at their books (Page
42).
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases
May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can
May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Write
May I…
Can
can’t = can not
- Elicits the structures
May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can
May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures a, b, c, d.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practice. The rest listen to and give comment.
Correct Ss’ error pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 10: 09 – 13/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 39</b>
<b>UNIT 6: STAND UP!</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission </b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils Ask for and give permission.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Order the words
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
Work individually
Look at the pictures in the
book
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5.Read and match</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 43.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues
<i>to get the information in order to match the pictures</i>
<i>to the appropriate dialogues.”</i>
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3-a, 4-b</i>
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 43. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they
are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and
get the information to write the missing words in
dialogue.
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. Come in 2. Sit down 3 close my book
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 10: 09 – 13/11/2015</b>
<b>UNIT 6: STAND UP!</b>
<i><b> Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions,</b></i>
ask for and give permission. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /k/, /d/ correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask for and give permission.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: jumped words
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words come and down
-Introduce the sounds /k/ and <b>/d/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Work individually
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
<b>Answer: </b>
<i>6. Let’s sing</i>
- Put the large piece of paper with the Come and sit
<i>down, Page 44, written on it on the board. Tell pupils</i>
that they are going to sing the Song.
- Play the recording all the way through for pupils to
listen while they are reading the song.
- Play the recording again for pupils to read each line
of the rhythm. Have pupils point to the corresponding
words while they are repeating.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. Repeat
the step, but this time have pupils swap their parts.
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 11: 16 – 20/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 41</b>
<b>UNIT 6: STAND UP!</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>give and respond to instructions,
ask for and give permission.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the Come in and sit down song
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
pictures to the text”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – e; 3 – b; 4 – d, 5- a.</i>
<b>6.</b> <b>Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look the pictures and name the
characters in each picture, find out the situation read
the sentences in the book and fill the suitable words to
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. sit 2. talk 3. Go out/ you can
4. go out/ you can’t
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: write and put the
instructions in the box. Choose and ask them out
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Sing the song
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Practice
words
<b>Week 11: 16 – 20/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 42</b>
<b>UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk about school facilities</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small.
- Vocabulary: school, big, small, gym, library, computer room, playground
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask for and give permission, give and respond to instructions.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing Come on and sit down song
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 46 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and
Mai talk about school facilities.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 46. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
School
Big
Small
Gym
Library
computer room
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
playground
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: That’s my school.
Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call some Ss to talk about school facilities.
Ask them to point the pictures and make sentences.
Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity
and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some Ss to perform their task at the front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 11: 16 – 20/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 43</b>
<b>UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to talk about school facilities</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about school facilities.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up: Jumped words </b>
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
<b>5. Look, read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
doing.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in 4 sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1.class 2. Library 3. Computer room</i>
<i>2. gym</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The This is the way to go to school song, Page
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
Do exercises
Indentify the characters in
each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters in
each picture
Work individually
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the book
<b>Week 11: 16 – 20/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 44</b>
<b>UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about school</b>
facilities
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Is your school big?- Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. It’s small.
- Vocabulary: new, old, large, small,
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to write the new words
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing This is the way to go to school song
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 48.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Hoa’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
New
Old
Large
small
Check vocab: what and where
- Elicits the structures
Is your school big?- Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. It’s
small.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Hoa and
Nam, Quan to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practice. The rest listen and give the remark.
Correct Ss’ pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
<b>Period 45</b>
<b>UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about school</b>
facilities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about school
facilities.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>1. Read and circle</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 49.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information in order to circle the best</i>
<i>answer.”</i>
Have a revision of the language:
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – big; 2 – small; 3-new; 4-big</i>
<b>6. Write about your school.</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to
read the sentences. Tell pupils that they are going to
read and answer the question
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 12: 23 – 27/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 46</b>
<b>UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>talk, ask and answer question
about school facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /g/, /l/ correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about school
facilities
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words gym and look
-Introduce the sounds /g/ and <b>/l/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 12: 23 – 27/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 47: </b>
<b>UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>talk, ask and answer question
about school facilities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer about school facilities.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Ask Ss to read the chant.
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
pictures to the text”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – d; 2 – c; 3 – a; 4 – b.</i>
<b>5. Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
Ps read the chant
Look at the sentences in the
book
Read and Work individually
Work in pairs
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. playground 2. It 3. Gym
<i> 4. Classroom 5. nice</i>
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: talk about school
facilities
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 12: 23 – 27/11/2015</b>
<b>Period 48</b>
<b>Period 47: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify school things.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: This/That is my pen.
- Vocabulary: pen, rubber=eraser, pencil, pencil case=pencil box, school bag, notebook, book,
pencil sharpener
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer about school things</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mr
Robot to identify school things.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
Read the chant
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Pen
rubber=eraser
pencil
pencil case=pencil box
school bag
notebook
book
pencil sharpener
check vocab: rub out and remember
Model sentence: This/That is my pen
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Phong to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the model
sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 13: 30/11 – 04/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 49</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify school things.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Talk about school things Ss have
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b on page 53 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Look, read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Ruler/is</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Pair work
Indentify the characters in
each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters in
each picture
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s play</b>
- Introduce the game Slap the board to pupils.
- Explain how the game is played
- Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Monitor
the activity and offer help when necessary.
- When the time is up, call on some groups to demonstrate
the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class
observe and give comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the sentences practised to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Play game
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 13: 30/11 – 04/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 50</b>
<b>UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school things.</b>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: These/Those are my books
- Vocabulary: notebooks, pens, pencil cases, rubbers, books, pencils (plural nouns)
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped words
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book on page 54.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Mr Robot’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach grammar:
Most singular nouns + s => plural nouns
Ex: books/ notebooks/ pencils/ pens/ pencil cases/
rubbers
Notes: how to pronounce plural nouns
- Elicits the structures: These/ Those are my books.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
Ask them to act out Peter. Repeat the step with some
other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice talking about school things in the
pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some Ss to perform the task at the front of the
class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 13: 30/11 – 04/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 51</b>
<b>UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school things.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: desk, school bag, nice, school things, new, old, too, table
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to talk about their school things.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>3. Read and write</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 55.
Practise individually
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information in order to fill the suitable</i>
<i>words to the sentences.”</i>
Have a revision of the language: This/ That is and
These/ those are….Ask Ss to read the paragraph and
do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. name; 2. Small/ nice; 3. School bag; </i>
<i>4. books/ notebooks; 5. Pencil cases/ pens</i>
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 55. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they
are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and
get the information to write the missing words in
sentences.
- Pupils practice and complete the sentences.
- Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
1. are/ books/ pens 2. Are/ pencils/ rulers
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the paragraph
Practise individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 13: 30/11 – 04/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 52</b>
<b>UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>identify and talk about school
things. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /r/, / / correctly .
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the school things in plural</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to talk about school things
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words ruler and these
-Introduce the sounds /r/ and <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
Ask ps to practice
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Period 53</b>
<b> UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps identify and talk about school things.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about school things they have.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
pictures to the text”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c.</i>
5. <b>Read and complete</b>
Ask ps to read the chant
Look at the sentences in the
book
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the 5 sentences in the book and
fill the suitable words.
Do exercise then practice in front of the whole class.
The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. name 2. This is 3. Those are/ pencils/
books 4. that’s 5. Those
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw the school
things and color them
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4. Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5. Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Fill the suitable words in the
blanks
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 14: 07 – 11/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 54</b>
<b>UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
school things.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about school things.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 58 and what they are saying.
Read the chant
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Nam
ask and answer question about school things.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Model sentence: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is.
Is that your pen? – No, it isn’t.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on some Ss. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some Ss to perform their task in front of the
class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the model
sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 14: 07 – 11/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 55</b>
<b>UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
school things.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading, and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about school things.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
- Play chain game
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 59 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Look, read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. pen/ it is 3. School bag/ it is</i>
<i> 2. pencil case/ it isn’t 4. Book/ it is</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
Play game
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Read and write
saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the
information to write the missing words in dialogue
sentences.
- Pupils read individually silently and complete the
dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of
the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
<b>Period 56</b>
<b>UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? </b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about colours.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What colour is your box? – It’s red
What colour are your pencils? – They’re green.
- Vocabulary: colour, red, green, blue, white, yellow, brown, orange
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about school things
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: talk about school things
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 60.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Practice
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60
- Teach vocabulary:
colour white
Red yellow
Green brown
Blue orange
Elicits the structures
What colour is your box? – It’s red
What colour are your pencils? – They’re green
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4. Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 15: 14 – 18/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 57</b>
<b>UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to make question and answer about how to</b>
spell one’s name.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer about colour.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 61
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5. Read and match</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 61.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the sentences
<i>to get the information in order to match the pictures</i>
<i>to the appropriate sentences.”</i>
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3-a; 4- e; 5-c</i>
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce My new pen, Page 61.
- Play the recording and listen to My new pen song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the sentences then
match
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 15: 14 – 18/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 58</b>
<b>UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
school things and colours. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly .
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about colours
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words it and orange
-Introduce the sounds /i/ and <b>/o/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 15: 14 – 18/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 59</b>
<b>UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
school things and colours.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about colours.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant.
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
suitable answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b.</i>
<b>5.</b> <b>Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
Read the chant
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the sentences in the
book
Read and Work individually
Work in pairs
-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. green 2. desk 3. They 4. pens 5.
Colour
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: color the rainbow.
Talk about it with classmate.
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
blanks
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 15: 14 – 18/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 60</b>
<b>UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAKTIME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
break-time activities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What do you do at break time? – I play badminton.
- Vocabulary: do, at break time, play, badminton, football, basketball, chess, table tennis
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing My new pen
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture a, b on
page 64 and what they are saying.
Sing the song
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and
Linda and Phong ask and answer questions about
break time activities.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Play at break time
Badminton football
Basketball chess
Table tennis do
check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: What do you do at break time?
I play football.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the model
sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Period 61</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
break time activities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.</b>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Ask and answer about Ss’ name
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 65 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in sentences 1, 2 and 3.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Chess 2. Table tennis 3. badminton</i>
Greeting
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Write about you</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 65.
- Pupils write individually and complete the sentences.
- Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of
the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Write the sentences
individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 16: 21 – 25/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 62</b>
<b>UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.
- Vocabulary: like, let’s, now, skipping, skating, hide-and-seek, blind man’s bluff
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to write the new words
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Ask and answer questions about break
time activities
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 66.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Linda’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
- Teach vocabulary:
Like let’s
Skipping skating
Hide-and-seek blind man’s bluff
- Elicits the structures
Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do.
Do you like hide- and- seek? - No, I don’t
<b> 2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Linh
and Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
Play role and speak out.
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 16: 21 – 25/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 63</b>
<b> UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5. Read and match</b>
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 67.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information in order to write the answer</i>
<i>the questions.”</i>
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. They play table tennis.</i>
<i><b>2.</b></i> <i>They like chess.</i>
<i><b>3.</b></i> <i>They like badminton.</i>
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Tell pupils that they are going to sing the
<i>Hide-and-seek Song.</i>
- Play the recording all the way through for pupils to
listen while they are reading the song.
- Play the recording again for pupils to read each line
of the rhythm. Have pupils point to the corresponding
words while they are repeating.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the dialogues in pairs
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 16: 21 – 25/12/2015</b>
<b>Period 64</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
break time activities, express likes and dislikes. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /bl/, /sk/
correctly .
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils to write new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: sing Hide-and-seek song
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words blind and skating
-Introduce the sounds /bl/ and <b>/sk/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
- Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 17: 28/12/2015 – 01/01/2016</b>
<b>Period 65</b>
<b>UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
break time activities, express likes and dislikes.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match
suitable answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in the
book
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – b; 2 – c; 3 – a; 4 – d.</i>
5. Write about you
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look at the pictures in the book and
fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph about
themselves.
Work individually to do the exercise then practice in
pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and
give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
6. Project
- Introduce the game to pupils.
- Explain how the game is played.
- Group work. Pupils play the game in groups.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.
- Have the whole class listen and remark the sentences
Ss make reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Fill the suitable words in the
blanks
Work in group
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 17: 28/12/2015 – 01/01/2016</b>
<b>Period 66</b>
<b>REVIEW 2</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i>
- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 6-10,
using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<i><b>-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook</b></i>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1
to unit 5
<b>1. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page
70 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick
the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer
with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.</i>
2. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: 1. 2. 3.</b> <i> 4.</i>
<b>3. Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and tick
Work individually
Listen and tick
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. school 2. Playground 3. room 4. Quan
4. Read and match
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to
get the information in order to match the sentences to
the sentences.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1.e 2. c 3. a 4.c 5. d
<b>5. Look and say</b>
Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 71.
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act
out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books.
Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Pair works
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 17: 28/12/2015 – 01/01/2016</b>
<b>Period 67</b>
<b>SHORT STORY</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
- Phonic: Revisions
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Do the exercises. Correct exercise.
<i><b>3. New lesson: </b></i>
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 6
to unit 10
<b>1. Fill the gaps. Then listen and check</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
on page 72 of the Student Book. Give the
identification of the characters in the pictures and the
characters’ words. Ss guess the suitable words to fill in
the blank. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to
the recording and check their answers
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check
their guess.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the story
- Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and
check Ss’ answers
Answer: 1. Hello 2. Meet you 3. Your/ Yes
4. chair/ armchair
<b>2. Ask and answer the questions</b>
-Ask students to read the story in the book and find out
the answers for the questions. Work in pairs to do the
exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole
class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. It is white 2. No, it isn’t
3. It is red 3. It’s big
3. Number the sentences. Then act out in pairs
Have Ps work in group. Read the story again and order
the sentences to make the meaningful dialogue.
Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and answer T’s
questions
Work in pairs
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. Miu: Maurice, this is Chit.
<b>2.</b> Chit: Please to meet you, Maurice
<b>3.</b> Maurice: Please to meet you too
<b>4.</b> Chit: Is this your house?
<b>5.</b> Maurice: Yes, it is.
<b>6.</b> Chit: It’s big!
<b>7.</b> Maurice: That’s right.
<b>4. Put the words in the correct order</b>
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 73.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the story to get
the information in order to order the words given.
- Have pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. Is that your chair?
<b>2.</b> Do you like hide-and-seek?
<b>3.</b> Pleased to meet you too.
<b>4.</b> Let’s play hide – and – seek.
<b>5.</b> Is this your house?
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics,
vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 6 - 10.
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 18: 04/01 – 08/01/2016</b>
<b>Period 68, 69, 70</b>
<b>First term test</b>
<b>Week 19: 11/01 – 15/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 71</b>
<b>UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- He’s my father./ She’s my mother.
- Vocabulary: man, next to, him, father, mother, young, nice, sister, brother, grandmother,
grandfather, he, she
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils answer T’s questions.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 6 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and
Mai identify family members.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 6. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
man next to
father mother
young nice
sister brother
grandmother grandfather
he she
check vocab: slap the board
Pair works
Look at the pictures in the
book
Model sentence: Who’s that?
- He’s my father./ She’s my mother.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 19: 11/01 – 15/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 72</b>
<b>UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify family members.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: photo, woman, girl, boy, her, family
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Ask and answer about Ss’ name
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 7 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and complete</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and who they are in
the photo.
Teach vocabulary:
Photo woman
Girl boy
Her family
Happy of
Check vocab: what and where
- Tell Ss that they are going look the photo and read the
sentences to get information to write the missing words.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Father 2. Mother 3. brother</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce A happy family song, Page 7.
- Play the recording and listen to A happy faamily song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
Greeting
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 19: 11/01 – 15/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 73</b>
<b>UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the ages of family members.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: How old is your brother? – He is seven.
- Vocabulary: eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty,
thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundred
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing A happy family song
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 8.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Sing the song
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Linda’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Eleven twelve
Thirteen fourteen
Fifteen seventeen
Eighteen nineteen
Check vocab: rub out and remember
- Elicits the structures
How old is your brother? – He is seven
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task. Talk about the age of
Nam’s family
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
<b>Week 19: 11/01 – 15/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 74</b>
<b>UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the age of family members.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: picture, years old
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils introduce their family members.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Talk about the age of family members.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>2. Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 9.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
<i>to get the information in order to fill the ages of</i>
<i>Quan’s family members </i>
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: Quan-10; His father-forty-four; His </i>
<i>mother-thirty-nine; His brother-fourteen</i>
<b>6. Write about your family</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to
answer the ages of their family members - Pupils
practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the paragraph
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 20: 18/01 – 22/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 75</b>
<b> UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>identify family members, talk
about the ages of family members. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /br/, /gr/ correctly .
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils to talk about the ages of family members.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting: identify family members, talk
about the ages of family members
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words brother and grandmother
-Introduce the sounds /br/ and <b>/gr/ </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 20: 18/01 – 22/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 76</b>
<b>UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i> identify family members, talk
about the ages of family members.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c.</i>
5. <b>Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look the photo of Linda’s family Ask
Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 11.
read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable
words to complete the dialogue.
Work individually to do the exercise then practice in
front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. family 2. father 3. mother 4. brother
5. sister
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: draw their family.
Tell the classmates about it
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 20: 18/01 – 22/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 77</b>
<b>UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able rooms in the house.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: There is a living room.
- Vocabulary: house, garden, over there, kitchen, bathroom, bedroom, dining room, garden
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 12 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and
Mai greet and introduce their names.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
House garden
over there kitchen
bathroom bedroom
dining room garden
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: There is a living room.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to identify the rooms in Nam’s
house. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 20: 18/01 – 22/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 78</b>
<b>UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to indentify rooms in the house.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test: </b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Talk about their houses
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 13 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
Ss practise
Indentify the characters
in each picture
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Look and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. A house 2. A living room</i>
<i> 3.a kitchen 4. Bedroom</i>
<i> 5. a bathroom 6.a kitchen </i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The way I clean my house song, Page 13.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
<b>Week 21: 25/01 – 29/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 79</b>
<b>UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house</b>
facilities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
- Vocabulary: fence, pond, gate, yard, fence
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>1.Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 14.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s
part and the other repeat Nam’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
- Teach vocabulary:
Fence pond
Gate yard
fence
- Elicits the structures
Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to talk about Tony’s house
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 21: 25/01 – 29/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 80</b>
<b>UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house</b>
facilities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: There is not a yard
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5.Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 15.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>about Phong’s house facilities to get the information</i>
<i>in order to fill the given words in the blanks.”</i>
<i> Teach vocabulary: </i>
Any around
But beautiful
in front of tree
in
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: There is not a yard
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph about Phong’s house
facilities and fill the given words in the blanks.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 4 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph and do
the exercise
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. House; 2. Beautiful; 3. Tree; 4. Pond</i>
<b>6. Write about your house</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to
read the questions and answer about their houses
facilities.
- Pupils practice in pairs to ask and answer questions
about their houses.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Ask Ss to talk about their houses.
- Have the whole class listen and reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 21: 25/01 – 29/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 81</b>
<b>UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify rooms in the house, ask</b></i>
and answer questions about house facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ch/ /, th/ /
correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up:
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about houses
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words kitchen and bathroom
-Introduce the sounds ch/ / and th<b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 21: 25/01 – 29/01/2016</b>
<b>Period : 82</b>
<b>UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>identify rooms in the house, ask
and answer questions about house facilities.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about their house facilities.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant.
<b>4. Read and write.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph to get the information in order to find the
suitable words to fill in the blanks”.
Ss look at Mai’s house and find the house facilities
read the paragraph individually and check their
answers. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. house; 2. pond; 3. tree; 4. living.</i>
5. <b>Read again and write the answers</b>
Read the chant
Read the paragraph in the
book
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in part 4 in the
book of page 17 and answer the questions.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. No, it isn’t. 2. It is blue.
3. Yes, there is. 4. Yes, there is.
5. No, there isn’t
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour
their houses. Write the names of the rooms in the
houses
-Ss introduce their houses in front of the class. The
rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the
pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read the paragraph and
answer the questions in
pairs
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 22: 1 – 5/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 83</b>
<b>UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the</b></i>
location of things in the house.
<i><b>2. Skills:</b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there.
- Vocabulary: Where, chair, poster, bed, picture, coat, ball, here, there
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils describe their houses.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 18 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and his
mother ask and answer questions about the location of
things in the house.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats his mother’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Where chair
Poster bed
Picture coat
Ball here
there
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call someone to practice in front of the
whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of
the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask
them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues.
Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about
the location of things in the house.. Call some pairs to
act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 22: 1 – 5/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 84</b>
<b>UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about the</b></i>
location of things in the house.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils to ask and answer a bout he specific information.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Ask and answer about Ss’ name and spell it
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page19 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
Greeting
Indentify the characters
in each picture
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and complete</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying mention the distance between the hand and the
thing in picture.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the given words in sentences 1, 2, 3 and 4.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
<i>Answers: 1. Here 2. There 3. Here 4. there</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce the The poster and the ball song, Page 19.
- Play the recording and listen the How are you? song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the contain of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
Workbook
<b>Week 22: 1 – 5/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 85</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location</b>
of things in the house (plural).
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.
- Vocabulary: near, under, on, behind, look in
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the poster and the ball song
<b>2. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 20.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s
part and the other repeat his mother’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Near under
On behind
look in preposition(prep)
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 20
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Quan and
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Linda to Ss use structure:
Where are the posters? –They are under my
bed.
Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the
step with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and
use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about the location of things in the house.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point to the pictures and
practise
Practice in pairs
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 22: 1 – 5/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 86</b>
<b>UNIT 3: WHERE’S MY BOOK?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the</b>
location of things in the house (plural)
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: bed, ball
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about the
location of things in the house
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 21
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5. Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 21.
Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions
<i>the paragraph about phong’s room and find out the</i>
<i>answer.”</i>
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the
activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. It is on the bed.</i>
<i> 2, They are under the bed</i>
<i> 3, They are near the desk. </i>
<i> 4, They are on the desk.</i>
<i> 5, They are on the wall</i>
<b>6. Write about your bedroom</b>
- Explain how to do the exercise
T introduces the topic “you are going to write the
paragraph about their houses”
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at the picture
Work In pairs
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 23: 15 – 19/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 87</b>
<b>UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about the
location of things in the house
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words chair and where
-Introduce the sounds / / and <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 23: 15 – 19/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 88</b>
<b>UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the</b></i>
location of things in the house
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house </b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read chant.
<b>4. Read and tick.</b>
T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the
suitable picture.
Work in groups to do the exercise then explain how to
choose the picture in front of the whole class. The rest
listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation
Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the reading text
<i>Answers: picture c.</i>
<b>5.Read and write</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the
blanks”.
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: draw your bedroom
and describe it to your classmates
- Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others
- Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work individually
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work individually
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Period : 89</b>
<b>UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
things in the room.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Are there any posters in the room?
- Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t
- Vocabulary: any, map, sofa, wardrobe, cupboard
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils describe their houses.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 24 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai
ask and answer questions about things in the room.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Any map
Sofa wardrobe
cupboard
Model sentence: Are there any posters in the room?
- Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about things in the room. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 23: 15 – 19/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 90</b>
<b>UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
things in the room.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
room.
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1 and 2 on page 25 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Look, read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what are there in
the picture.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read the sentences and
write the missing words to fill in the blanks.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 2. Cupboard 3. Map 4. chairs</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real things in their houses to
answer them.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Answer the questions
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 24: 22 – 26/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 91</b>
<b>UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of</b>
things.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: How many chairs are there? - There are six.
- Vocabulary: How many, cup, fan, mirror, door, window, count
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>1.Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 26.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s
part and the other repeat Nam’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
How many cup
Fan mirror
Door window
count
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
- Elicits the structures
How many chairs are there? - There are six
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about quantity of things.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 24: 22 – 26/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 92</b>
<b>UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of</b>
things.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about quantity
of things.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at picture on page 27 of the Student
Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the
picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they
are going to listen to the recording and number the
things they listen to. They should number the things.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the things. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5.Read and write</b>
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and find out the
information to answer the questions.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information in order to answer the</i>
<i>questions”</i>
Have a revision of the language.
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. There is one door.</i>
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph, ask
and answer questions in
pairs
<i><b>4.</b></i> <i>There are four pictures.</i>
<i><b>5.</b></i> <i>There are two fans.</i>
<b>6. Let’s play</b>
- Introduce the game Spot the difference to pupils.
- Explain how the game is played. Pupils find out the
difference things in the pictures
- Pupils play the game then report in front of the class.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.
- When the time is up, call on some Ss to demonstrate
- Correct the mistake and pronunciation if necessary.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 24: 22 – 26/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 93</b>
<b>UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
quantity of things, things in the room. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly.
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about quantity of things.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to describe their rooms
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words fan and cup
-Introduce the sounds / / and <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 24: 22 – 26/02/2016</b>
<b>Period : 94</b>
<b>UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils describe their rooms.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<b>4. Read and circle.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences and choose the best answer”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. Are; 2. is; 3. lamps; 4. Chairs; 5. on</i>
5. <b>Read and write</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look at the picture and identify the
things in the room. Read the paragraph in the book and
fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph.
Work individually to do the exercise then report in
front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. is 2. chairs 3. T.V 4. pictures
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Interview their
friends and complete the table using the structure:
How many … are there? – There are/ There is….
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 25: 29/2 – 04/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 95</b>
<b>UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills:</b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Do you have a doll?-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t
- Vocabulary: have, teddy bear, doll, car, puzzle, robot
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils describe things in the room.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 30 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and
Linda identifying toys.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
Read the chant
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Linda’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Have teddy bear
Doll car
Puzzle robot
Model sentence: Do you have a doll?
-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3. Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to identify toys. Call some pairs
to act out
Correct their pronunciation and mistake.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 25: 29/2 – 04/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 96</b>
<b>UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm – Identify toys. </b>
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are.
Teach vocabulary:
Shelf pretty
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in paragraph.
- Ss read silently and complete the paragraph.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Car 2. Ball 3. Doll 4. Do 5. they</i>
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
Pairs work
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and number
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real toys they have to answer.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions about the toys.
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 25: 29/2 – 04/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 97</b>
<b>UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
- Sentence Partners: Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t.
- Vocabulary: yo-yo, ship, plane, kite
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to talk about toys
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped letters
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 32.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Linda’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
yo-yo ship
plane kite
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
Does your brother have a robot?
- Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about
toys.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pairs practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 25: 29/2 – 04/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 98</b>
<b>UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting: talk about the toys Ss have.
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 33
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p
pictures True or False the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5.Read and write</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 33.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information in order to answer the</i>
<i>questions about Phong’s toys.”</i>
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the paragraph.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. He has a robot.</i>
<i><b>2.</b></i> <i>She has a teddy bear.</i>
<i><b>3.</b></i> <i>Yes, he does.</i>
<i><b>4.</b></i> <i>She has a yo-yo and a puzzle.</i>
<i><b>5.</b></i> <i>No, he doesn’t. </i>
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The Linda has a little doll song, Page 33.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work In pair to ask and
answer the questions
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 26: 07 – 11/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 99</b>
<b>UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, and ask and answer</b></i>
questions about toys. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /pl/, / / correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song Linda has a little doll
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words plane and ship
-Introduce the sounds /pl/ and <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 26: 7 – 11/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 100</b>
<b>UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, ask and answer</b></i>
questions about the toys.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the toys.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song: Linda has a little doll.
<b>4. Read and complete.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph to get the information in order to fill the
words given to the blanks”. Ss look at the picture and
find out the situation and the toys in the picture
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
Sing the song
Look at the picture in the
book
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. toys; 2. orange; 3. two; 4. ship; 5. green</i>
<b>5. Write about you</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 35. Tell pupils
that they are going to read and use the real information
about themselves to write the sentences about their
toys.
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the sentences.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: make a paper toy and
ask, answer questions about toys
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work in pairs
Pairs work
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 26: 07 – 11/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 101</b>
<b>REVIEW 3</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i>
- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units
11-15, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<i><b>-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook</b></i>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit11
to unit 15
<b>1. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick
the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer
with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.</i>
2. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 36
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: 1. 2. 3.</b> <i> 4.</i>
<b>3. Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill
the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in
pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front
of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and tick
Work individually
Listen and tick
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. house 2. bedrooms 3. bathroom
4. small 5. There 5. They
4. Read and match
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to
get the information in order to match the sentences to
the sentences.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1.c 2. a 3. d 4.b
<b>6. Look and say</b>
Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and4 on Page 37.
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Pair works
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 26: 07 – 11/03/2016</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:</b></i>
- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
- Phonic: Revisions
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Do the exercises. Correct exercise.
<i><b>3. New lesson: </b></i>
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit
11 to unit 15
<b>1. Read the story. Put these lines in the correct</b>
<b>bubbles. Then listen and check.</b>
- Read the sentences given and read the story about
Cat and Mouse 3
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
on page 38 of the Student Book. Give the
identification of the characters in the pictures and the
characters’ words. Ss read and find out the suitable
sentences to fill in the blanks and explain how to do
the exercise.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and check their answers
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check
their guess.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the story
- Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and
check Ss’ answers
Answer: 1. Who is Mimi?
2. How many brothers and sisters do you have?
3. Where are they?
4. How many rooms are there in your house?
<b>2. Correct the answer</b>
-Ask students to read the story in the book and read
the sentences given to find out the mistake and correct
the false sentences. Work individually to do the
exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Read the sentences
Give the identification
Work in pairs
Listen and answer T’s
questions
class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. No, he has two sister.
2. No, he has a brother.
3. No, he is Jack.
4. There are eight rooms.
3. Unscramble these words from the conversation
Have Ps work individually. Read the story again and
order the letters to make the meaningful words.
Have pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
.
- Have the whole class read each word in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: a. sister b. brother c. house
d. rooms e. hello f. mouse
<b>4. Complete the conversation between Miu</b>
<b>and Mimi</b>
- Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 39.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogue
between Miu and Mimi and find out the suitable words
to complete the meaningful dialogue.
- Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help
when necessary.
- Have pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: Miu: Name/is
Mimi: name
Miu: to meet you
Mimi: Nice to meet you
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics,
vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15.
Work in group
Pair work
Read and do exercise in
pairs.
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 27: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
TEST – CHECKING THE TEST 3
<b>Week 27: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
<b>Period: 105 </b>
<b>UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
pets.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Do you have any pets?–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have….
- Vocabulary: dog, pet, cute, cat, parrot, rabbit, goldfish
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils answer T’s questions.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
<b>1.Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 6 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Quan
and Mai ask and answer questions about pets.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the others
repeat Mai’s, Quan’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Pair works
Look at the pictures in the
book
Dog pet
Cute cat
Parrot rabbit
goldfish
Check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: Do you have any pets?
–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have….
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about toys. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 27: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
<b>Period: 106</b>
<b>UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer about pets.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: in the cage, in the fish tank
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer about pets.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Jumped words
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
<b>5. Look and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the picture and who they are in
the picture.
Teach vocabulary:
In the cage in the fish tank
Pet shop bird
Check vocab: what and where
- Tell Ss that they are going look the picture and read
the paragraph to get information, find out the suitable
words to write in the blanks.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Dog 2. cats 3. Birds 5. Goldfish</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
<b>6. Let’s write </b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to write
the answers about the pets they have
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
Work individually
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
The rest of the class listen and give comments and
reinforce their pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 28: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
<b>Period: 107</b>
<b>UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able ask and answer questions about the location</b>
of pets
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Where are the cats? – They are under the table.
- Vocabulary: over there, with, in the garden, flower pot, fish tank
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss write the new words
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting about the pets
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 42.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Nam’s
part and the other repeat his mother’s part.
Pairs work
Look at the pictures in the
book
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
over there with
in the garden flower pot
fish tank
Check vocab: rub out and remember
- Elicits the structures
Where are the cats? – They are under the table.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task. Talk about the location of
pets.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do the exercise in the
wwwwworkbook
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 28: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
<b>Period: 108</b>
<b>UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location</b>
of pets.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: picture, years old
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Talk about the location of pets.
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 43
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and number the pictures they hear. They
should guess the answer.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5.Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to open the book on page 9.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information in order to fill the missing</i>
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
<i>words about the pets and the location of the pets.</i>
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. Pets 2. Cat/on 3. Dog/ under</i>
<i> 4. parrots/ rabbit/ garden</i>
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce Do you have any pets song, Page 43.
- Play the recording and listen to the song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the paragraph
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 28: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
<b>Period: 109</b>
<b>UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
<b>pets and the location of pets. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly .</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about the location of pets they have.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song: Do you have any pets?
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words dog and parrot
-Introduce the sounds / / and <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
words
<b>Week 28: 14 – 18/03/2016</b>
<b>Period : 110</b>
<b>UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b.</i>
5. <b>Read and write</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look the picture of Mai’s pets. Ask Ss
to identify the characters in the pictures on page 45.
Read the paragraph and questions in the book and
write the answers.
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Work individually to do the exercise then practice in
pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and
give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. She is 8 years old 2. Yes, she does.
3.She has a dog, Two goldfish and two parrots.
4.It’s at the door.
5.They are in the fish tank
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: draw their pets. Tell
the classmates about it
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Vb89Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 29: 28/3 – 01/04/2016</b>
<b>Period : 111</b>
<b>UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
toys
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What toys do you like? - I like ships
- Vocabulary: ship, truck, kite, plane, train
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
Read the chant
page 46 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Mai
ask and answer questions about toys.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Ship truck
Kite plane
train
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: What toys do you like
- I like ships.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about toys. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Period : 112</b>
<b>UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
toys.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test: </b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Talk about toys
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read
and get information to write the missing words in the
sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
Ss practise
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. playroom 2. planes</i>
<i> 3. dolls 4. ships</i>
<i> 5. kites 6. trucks</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write </b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to write
the answers about the toys they have
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments and
reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 29: 28/3 – 01/04/2016</b>
<b>Period : 113</b>
<b>UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: How many parrots do you have?- I have five parrots
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to talk about their toys they have
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Warm up: Chatting about toys
<b>1.Look, Listen and repeat</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 48.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Quan’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Elicits the structures
How many parrots do you have?- I have 5 parrots.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48
Elicit the characters in the pictures and guess what
are they talking about. Ask Ss to guess and complete
the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to talk about quantity
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pairs work
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 29: 28/3 – 01/04/2016</b>
<b>Period : 114</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: different
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about the toys they have.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: guessing games
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5.Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 49.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>about children’s toys to get the information in order</i>
<i>to fill the suitable words in the blanks.”</i>
<i> Teach vocabulary: </i>
Different
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph about children’s toys
and fill the suitable words in the blanks.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Group works
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. Dogs/ parrots; 2. Cats/ dog; 3. goldfish</i>
<b>6. Let’s write </b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to
write the answers about the toys and the quantity of
toys they have
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments
and reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the paragraph and do
the exercise
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 30: 04 – 08/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 115</b>
<b>UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
toys and quantity. Pronounce the sounds in the letters Kite/ai/,/e/ ship /i/ correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: behind
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about toys.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chain game
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words kite and ship
-Introduce the sounds i/ai/ e / /and ship <b>/ i / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
<b>Week 30: 04 – 08/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 116</b>
<b>UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about their house facilities.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant.
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph to get the information in order to match the
suitable questions to the answers
Read the questions and answers individually then
matching. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b.</i>
5. <b>Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book of
page 51 and answer the questions.
Work individually to find out the suitable words to fill
in the blanks then give the answer in front of the
whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. trucks. 2. ten. 3. has.
4. cats. 5. How
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour the
toys and the pets they have.
-Ss introduce their toys and their pets in front of the
Read the chant
Read the paragraph in the
book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Read the paragraph and
answer the questions ind
individually
class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct
the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 30: 04 – 08/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 117</b>
<b>UNIT 13: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
one’s action in progress.
<i><b>2. Skills:</b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What are you doing?- I am reading.
- Vocabulary: doing, reading, cooking, listening to music, cleaning the floor
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about toys they have.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 52 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Hoa
ask and answer questions about one’s action in
progress.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other
repeats Hoa’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 52. Elicit the
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Doing reading
Cooking listening to music
cleaning the floor
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: What are you doing? - I am reading.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call pairs to practice in front of the whole
class. Practice in pairs. Allocate the parts of the
characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about
one’s action in progress. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 30: 04 – 08/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : upload.123doc.net</b>
<b>UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
one’s action in progress.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils to write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up</b>
Ask and answer about one’s action in progress
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 53 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Explain the
situation and how to do exercise. Ss are going to read the
paragraph about Mai’s family’s action in progress
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the answers for questions What are they doing?
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. reading 2. Is listening to music</i>
<i> 3. are cooking</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Explain how to do the exercise
T introduces the topic “you are going to write the
Pairs work
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Work in pairs
answers for the questions about your action in progress”
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the
sentences.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
Workbook
<b>Week 31: 11 – 15/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 119</b>
<b>UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s</b>
action in progress.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.
- Vocabulary: singing, drawing, playing the piano, watching TV, doing one’s homework
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress.
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: talk about Ss’ (in class) action in progress
<b>1. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 54.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
Individually work
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s
part and the other repeat his father’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Singing drawing
playing the piano watching TV
doing one’s homework
Check vocab: Rub out and remember
- Elicits the structures
What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54
Elicit the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss to guess
and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss use structure:
What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.
Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the
step with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and
use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about someone’s action in progress.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Practice in pairs
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 31: 11 – 15/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 120</b>
<b>UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s</b>
action in progress.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: skating
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about the
someone’s action in progress.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
<b>5. Read and match</b>
Explain how to do exercise on page 55.
Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions
<i>and match the suitable answer.”</i>
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some pairs to report their answers. Others
listen and comment.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. b 2.d 3.a 4.c </i>
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce the I love my parents song, Page 55.
- Play the recording and listen the song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Read the questions and
answers in pairs
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 31: 11 – 15/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 121</b>
<b>UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about</b></i>
one’s and someone’s action in progress. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ea/ i: /, aw / /
correctly .
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: sing I love my parents song
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words reading and drawing
-Introduce the sounds ea/ i: / and aw <b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
workbook
<b>Week 31: 11 – 15/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 122</b>
<b>UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
one’s and someone’s action in progress.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action </b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant.
<b>4. Read and complete.</b>
T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the
suitable words to fill in the blanks.
Work individually to do the exercise then explain how
to choose the words given to fill in the blanks in front
of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation
Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the reading text
<i>Answers: 1. is. 2. In 3. Watching </i>
<i> 4. playing 5. listening</i>
<b>5. Let’s write</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work individually
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Answer: 1. His family is at home.
<b>2.</b> He is watching TV.
<b>3.</b> She is playing the piano.
6. Project
- Introduce the situation. Ask Ss observe the pictures
and talk about what children are doing.
- Explain how to do the exercise: tell your classmates
what they are doing.
- Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others
listen and comment.
- Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 32: 18 – 22/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 123</b>
<b>UNIT 19: THEY ARE IN THE PARK.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
activities in the park.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What are they doing? - They are skating.
- Vocabulary: in the park, skating, cycling, skating, flying kites, skipping
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils describe their houses.</b>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
<b>1.Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 58 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Mrs Lan
and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the
room.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on someone. One repeats Nam’s part, the others
repeat Mai’s part, and Mrs Lan’s part
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
in the park skating
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: What are they doing?
- They are skating.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Linda to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
about activities in the park. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 32: 18 – 22/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 124</b>
<b>UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
activities in the park.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: sports, games, football, happy, today
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up: ask and answer questions about activities in</b>
the park.
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1a, b and 2a, b on page 59
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
Practise in pairs
Indentify the characters
in each picture
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
doing.
- Teach vocabulary:
Sports games
Football happy
Today
- Check vocabulary: what and where
- Tell Ss that they are going to read the paragraph and
write the missing words to fill in the sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. In the park 2. Playing football </i>
<i> 3. skipping 4. Is cycling</i>
<i> 5. flying kites</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real information about yourself
to answer them.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
Work individually
Answer the questions
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 32: 18 – 22/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 125</b>
<b>UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the</b>
weather in different places.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny.
- Vocabulary: weather, like, great, sunny, rainy, cloudy, windy, snowy, stormy
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
<b>1.Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 60.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Weather like
Great sunny
Rainy cloudy
Windy snowy
Stormy
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city?
– It’s sunny.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 32: 18 – 22/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 126</b>
<b>UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the</b>
weather in different places.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about the
weather in different places.
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at picture on page 61 of the Student
Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the
picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they
are going to listen to the recording and number the
things they listen to. They should number the things.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the things. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5. Look, read and write</b>
Ask Ss to read the questions and observe the picture
find out the information to answer the questions.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the question
<i>and observe the pictures in order to answer the</i>
<i>questions”</i>
Have a revision of the language.
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. cloudy 2. Windy 3. Rainy 4. sunny</i>
<b>6. Let’s sing</b>
- Introduce The weather song, Page 61.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the question then
answer it using the cues in
the pictures
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 33: 25 – 29/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 127</b>
<b>UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
activities in the park and the weather in different places. Pronounce the sounds in the letters
ai/ /, a-e/ / correctly.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words rainy and skate
-Introduce the sounds ai/ / and a-e<b>/ / </b>
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Listen and write</b>
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>Answer: </b>
<b> 3. Let’s chant</b>
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 33: 25 – 29/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 128</b>
<b>UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: </b></i>ask and answer questions about
activities in the park and the weather in different places.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils describe their rooms.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<b>4. Read and match.</b>
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to match the suitable answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some pairs to report their answers and
explain how to choose the answers. Others listen and
comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. c; 2. d; 3. b; 4. e; 5. a</i>
5. <b>Read and complete</b>
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and
fill the words given to complete the paragraph.
Work individually to do the exercise then report in
front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. weather 2. park 3. flying
4. playing 5. skating
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and color a
weather icon for tomorrow’s weather in S’s place.
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 33: 25 – 29/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 129</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer about places.</b></i>
<i><b>2. Skills:</b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Where’s Sa Pa?- It’s in north Vietnam
- Vocabulary: north, south, central, beautiful
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils talk about the weather.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Look, listen and repeat.</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 64 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and
Linda ask and answer questions about places”.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Linda’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 64. Elicit the
Teach vocabulary:
North south
Central beautiful
check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: Where’s Sa Pa?
- It’s in north Vietnam
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Quan to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3. Let’s Talk</b>
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs ask and answer questions about
places. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation and mistake.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 33: 25 – 29/4/2016</b>
<b>Period : 130</b>
<b>UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about</b></i>
places.
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
<b>Warm up – Ask and answer questions about places. </b>
<b>4. Listen and number</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 65 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and number the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
<b>5. Read and write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are.
Teach vocabulary:
city Ha long bay
place town
village bridge
market
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
<i>Answers: 1. Thang Long bridge/north Vietnam </i>
<i> 2. Ben Thanh market/south Vietnam</i>
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>6. Let’s write</b>
- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real information about their
places to answer.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions about their places.
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others
listen and give comments.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
Pairs work
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and number
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Listen and sing
- Retell the content of the lesson.
<i><b> 5. Homework</b></i>
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
workbook
<b>Week 34: 02/5 – 06/5/2016</b>
<b>Period : 131</b>
<b>UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Sentence Partners: Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t.
- Vocabulary: near, far from, far, distance
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to talk about toys
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped letters
<b>6. Look, Listen and repeat.</b>
Have Ss to look at the book at page 66.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s
part and the other repeat Linda’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
- Teach vocabulary:
Near far from
Far distance
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
Is Hai Duong near Ha noi?
–Yes, it is/No, It isn’t.
<b>2. Point and say</b>
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters of the
children to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
<b>3 - Let’s talk: </b>
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about
distance.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pairs practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 34: 02/5 – 06/5/2016</b>
<b>Period : 132</b>
<b>UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
<i><b>1. Knowledge: </b></i>
<b>- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance.</b>
<i><b>2. Skills: </b></i>
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
<i><b>3. Language focus:</b></i>
- Vocabulary:
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
<i>1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.</i>
<i>2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.</i>
<b>III. Teaching processes:</b>
<i><b>1. Class organization:</b></i>
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>
<b> - Have pupils write the new words.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting: talk about the distance.
<b>4. Listen and tick</b>
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p
pictures True or False the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
<b>5. Read and complete</b>
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 67.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
<i>to get the information about Nam’s places in order to</i>
<i>fill the suitable words in the blanks”</i>
Teach vocab:
Theater now
Temple lake
Museum water puppet theater
- Check vocab: Slap the board
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the paragraph.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work In pair to ask and
answer the questions
to reinforce their pronunciation
<i>Answers: 1. Name 2. Near 3. Theater 4. far</i>
<b>6. Let’s play</b>
- Explain how the game is played: pupils play in pairs.
- When the time is up, call on pairs to demonstrate the
game at the front of the class. The rest of the class
- Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Follow up:
- Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their
classmates / friends.
<i><b>4.Consolidation</b></i>
Summary the lesson
<i><b>5.Homework</b></i>
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Play game
Do exercises in the
workbook
<b>Week 34: 02/5 – 06/5/2016</b>
Period : 133-134
<b>UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3</b></i>
Objective <b>-</b> Ss will be able to pronunciate the sound /ar/, /or/ in the
words far and north respectively
Language
focus
<b>-</b> Phonics: far and north /ar/ - /or/
Resources Tape, textbook, pictures.
PROCEDURE
<b>Steps</b> <b>Learning activities</b> <b>Language</b>
<b>focus</b>
<b>Modes</b>
1. Warm up
(5’)
-Have Ss sing a song. Whole
class
2.Listen and
repeat (10’)
-Have Ss open the book page 61,
look at the far and north and notice
the letter coloured differently in both
-Produce the sound of the letter
<i><b>/ar/, /or/ the words far and north </b></i>
/ar/: far Can Tho is far from HCM
<i>city.</i>
<i><b>/or/: north Sa Pa is in north VN</b></i>
-Read loud the sounds and ask Ss to
repeat chorally.
<b>Phonics:</b>
<i><b>/ar/, /or/</b></i>
-Call some Ss repeat individually.
-Correct their pronunciation if
needed Individual
3. Listen and
write (10’)
- Ask Ss to pay attention to
exercise 2 on page 68.
- Ask Ss to read 2 sentences and
guess the missing information.
- Play the tape 3 times and ask Ss to
listen carefully.
- Ask Ss to write the words they hear
then exchange the information with
their partner.
- Call some Ss to write their answers
on the board.
- Play the tape again and check with
whole class
- Check and give feedback.
<b>Key:</b>
<i>1 far </i>
<i>2 north</i> Individual
Pairs
Individual
4.Let’s chant
(13’)
<b>-</b>Play the tape “ Where’s Ba Vi?”
for Ss to listen while they are
reading the chant in their books
<b>-</b>Call on a group of six: three of
them to repeat each line of the
chant.
<b>-</b>Show Ss how to say the chant and
do the actions.
<b>-</b>Play the recording a few times for
Ss to do choral and individual
repetition.
<b>-</b>Have Ss practice the chant in
groups and clap the syllables.
<b>-</b>Monitor the activity and offer help
when necessary/ correct typical
pronunciation errors.
<b>-</b>Call on a group to recite the chant.
The others clap the syllables
<b>-</b>Listen and give comments.
The chant:
<i><b>“ Where’s </b></i>
<i><b>Ba Vi?”</b></i>
Whole
class
Groups
5.Home-link
(2’) Have Ss to practise chanting <i><b><sub>“Where’s Ba Vi?” </sub></b></i><sub>at home.</sub>
Whole
class
Week 35 Period : 136
Preparation date: 10 - 05- 2016
Objective Ss will be able to :
Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related
to the topics from units 16-20, using the phonics, vocabulary
and sentence patterns they have learnt.
Language
focus
Sentence Partners: Review.
Vocabulary: Review.
Resources Tape, textbook, flashcards, pictures.
PROCEDURE
<b>Steps</b> <b>Learning activities</b> <b>Language </b>
<b>focus</b>
<b>Modes</b>
1.Warm up
(3’)
-Have Ss to sing a song Whole
class
2.Listen and
tick (12’)
- Tell Ss that they are going to
listen and tick the correct boxes.
- Give Ss a few seconds to look
at the pictures.
- Check comprehension and
elicit information in the pictures
and give feedback
- Play the recording three times
for Ss to listen, do the task and
check their answers.
- Get Ss to swap and check their
answers before checking as a
class.
- Explain the answers and give
further support to Ss who got
more than half of the answers
Key:
1.a
2.b
3.a
4.b
5.a
Whole
class
Individual
Pairs
3. Listen and
number (10’)
- Ask Ss to pay attention to 4
pictures on page 70 then
describe the differences between
the pictures.
- Ask Ss to predict the order of
these picture.
- Write their prediction on the
board.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and
choose , number the right picture
then write the number in the
picture Ss hear.
- Play the tape three times to
listen
- Call some Ss to read loud their
answer with their explanations.
- Play the tape again to check
their predicts with their answers
Key:
a 2
b 3
c 4
d 1